Got rid of all byte-compiler warnings on Emacs Load
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
16to list them.
6344985d 17
d5483ab1
GM
18** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
19Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if they these are available.
1fa28578
GM
20\f
21* Changes in Emacs 21.1
22
f0298744
DL
23** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
24displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
25menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
26menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
27
9a8d84ca
DL
28** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
29a version-dependent component.
30
d76c03ea
GM
31** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
32Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
33will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
34character is still bound as before.
35
3b4fa1b2
DL
36** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
37using that menu.
38
40e857ea
DL
39** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
40suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
41
c08398de
DL
42** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
43buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
44contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
45by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
46insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
47the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
48Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
49
3d6cd763
GM
50** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
51coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
52escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
53such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
54recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 55always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 56read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
57(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
58RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 59
0b8a3a6d
DL
60** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
61environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
62
63** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
64point in a pop-up window.
65
66** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
67displays all characters in that character set.
68
69** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
70coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
71
5cb6a58e
SM
72** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
73on the context.
74
a1b8d58b
GM
75** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
76
6e417ca5
DL
77** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
78been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
79
5898e075
DL
80** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
81`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
82indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
83indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
84
abfcc168
GM
85** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
86sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 87(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
88You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
89
cc181e95
GM
90** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
91on the display using several methods
92
93- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
94a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
95be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
96
97- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
98equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
99
da4496b6 100- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
101
102- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
103the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
104
3b4fa1b2 105** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 106an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 107command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 108does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 109
176256a1 110** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
111`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
112typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 113
dd0add8e
DL
114** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
115characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
116
699238d9
GM
117** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
118compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
119this behavior.
120
121The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
122compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
123Emacs dump core.
124
125** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 126
7233c5bd
GM
127*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
128whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
129is useful for debugging X problems.
130
131Example:
132
699238d9 133 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 134
100b3cbb
GM
135*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
136visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
137the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
138and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
139visual class names are
140
141 TrueColor
142 PseudoColor
143 DirectColor
144 StaticColor
145 GrayScale
146 StaticGray
147
148Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
149`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
150meaning.
151
152The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
153supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
154`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
155visual.
156
157Example:
158
699238d9 159 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
160
161*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
162specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
163default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
164resource values are `true' or `on'.
165
166Example:
167
699238d9 168 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 169
0d0c76b8
EZ
170** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
171more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
172now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
173
42088c12 174** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 175display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
176shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
177be customized.
c60ea02e 178
31047e0d
DL
179** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
180
b02786f9
GM
181** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
182all frames except the selected one.
183
3261c1d8
DL
184** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
185to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
186
ffe36136
GM
187** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
188the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
189area or with tooltips.
190
559cee90
DL
191** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
192read mail from the menu etc.
193
271b4185
GM
194** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
195a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
196
0daee095
GM
197** Changes in Texinfo mode.
198
199** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
200macros
201
202 Key binding Macro
203 -------------------------
204 C-c C-c C-s @strong
205 C-c C-c C-e @emph
206 C-c C-c u @url
207 C-c C-c q @quotation
208 C-c C-c m @email
209
559cee90
DL
210** Changes in Outline mode.
211
212There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
213`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
214the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
215
404fa7d6
DL
216** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
217groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
218
8964fec7
SM
219** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
220or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
221several other special buffers.
222
39783d73
WP
223** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
224under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
225.emacs file.
226
227The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
228determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
229
d35fce81
GM
230** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
231abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
232`directory-abbrev-alist'.
233
df5a1902
GM
234** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
235is running in batch mode. For example,
236
237 (message "%s" (read t))
238
239will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
240to standard output.
241
a933dad1
DL
242** Faces and frame parameters.
243
244There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
245Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
246`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
247`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
248sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
249for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
250parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
251
252Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
253`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 254`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
255`default' face and vice versa.
256
f77a4a8a
GM
257** New face `menu'.
258
259The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
260Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
261attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
262
a933dad1
DL
263** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
264
265The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
266colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
267correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
268the screen gamma of a frame's display.
269
270PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
271in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
272color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
273
274The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
275`ScreenGamma'.
276
277** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
278
279The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
280Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
281oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
282of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
283the text.
284
285** Emacs has a new face implementation.
286
287The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
288font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
289height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
290These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
291specify a font.
292
293Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
294These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
295under Lisp changes, below.
296
297** New default font is Courier 12pt.
298
299** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
300its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
301it is hollow.
302
303** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
304truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
305foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
306customizing face `fringe'.
307
308** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
309can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
310
311** LessTif support.
312
313Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
314need a version 0.88.1 or later.
315
316** Toolkit scroll bars.
317
318Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
319LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
320configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
321bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
322bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
323Emacs.
324
325When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
326Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
327Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
328Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
329define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
330`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
331
332Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
333a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
334directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
335different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
336system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
337add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
338
339The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
340`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
341This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
342image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
343Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
344
345** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
346
347When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
348widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
349Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
350
351** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
352
353When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
354whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
355defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
356highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
357displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
358whitespace.
359
360** Busy-cursor.
361
362Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
363display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
364
365** Blinking cursor
366
367M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
368terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
369and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
370the group `cursor'.
371
372** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
373
374This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
375generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
376See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
377details.
378
379Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
380have to do anything to activate it.
381
382** Tabs and variable-width text.
383
384Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
385defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
386independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
387Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
388
389** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
390
391*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
392
393 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
394
79dd1637
RS
395The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
396LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 397
79dd1637
RS
398*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
399LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
400
401** Hscrolling in C code.
402
cc181e95
GM
403Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
404`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
405customized.
a933dad1
DL
406
407** Tool bar support.
408
409Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
410how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
411
412** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
413
414Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
415mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
416line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
417about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
418in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
419
420Currently, the following actions have been defined:
421
422- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
423buffers.
424
425- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
426M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
427
428- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
429
559cee90 430- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
431toggles the read-only status.
432
433- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
434
435** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
436
437When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 438from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
439non-nil.
440
441** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
442
443Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
444Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
445the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
446italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
447Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
448attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
449on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
450
451** Sound support
452
2f516940 453Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 454driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 455supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1
DL
456
457** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
458the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
459forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
460value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
461users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
462even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
463
464The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
465
466** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
467
468As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
469drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
470`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
471
472** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
473bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
474
475This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
476`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
477variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
478
479** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
480
481When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
482value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
483number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
484fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
485
486When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
487value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
488number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
489fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
490
491** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
492notably at the end of lines.
493
494All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
495spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
496
eee54b0e
DL
497There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
498
a933dad1
DL
499** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
500query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
501after each match to get the replacement text.
502
d5483ab1
GM
503** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
504you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0
GM
505
506** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
507you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
508lisp-complete-symbol.
509
a933dad1
DL
510** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
511
163ea954
RS
512If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
513longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
514it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
515window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
516
517- User option: max-mini-window-height
518
519Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
520fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
521specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
522
523Default is 0.25.
524
2f72fd2f
GM
525** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
526
0d43b60d
GM
527** Changes to hideshow.el
528
529Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
530selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
531
532*** Generalized block selection and traversal
533
534A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
535(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
536which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
537`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
538point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
539(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
540
541If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
542i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
543backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
544the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
545
546*** Isearch support for updating mode line
547
548During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
549blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
550line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
551portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
552is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
553
554To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
555something like this in your .emacs.
556
557 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
558 (lambda ()
559 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
560
559cee90
DL
561** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
562
563If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
564entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
565log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
566
567New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
568buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
569
570Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
571if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
572
573The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
574expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
575cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
576a file.
577
3476b54a
GM
578** Changes in Font Lock
579
580*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
581font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
582mode.
583
b3b98592
GM
584** Comint (subshell) changes
585
586Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
587and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
588
589The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
590buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
591buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
592
593The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
594M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
595the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
596
31fc5d15
GM
597Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and
598scheme-interaction-mode now highlight user input, and support choosing
599previous input with mouse-2. To control this feature, see the
600user-option `comint-highlight-input'.
601
e26cec67
GM
602** Changes to Rmail mode
603
c0510d27
GM
604*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
605set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
606receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
607recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
608`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
609as correspondent.
610
611Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
612mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 613regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 614
3b55acc9
GM
615*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
616to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
617Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
618with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
619for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
620
6a1950ec
GM
621*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
622like `j'.
623
5bb6f079
RS
624*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
625specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 626digest message.
e26cec67 627
993d8b7d
DL
628*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
629in which folder to put messages automatically.
630
400a1ed0
GM
631** Changes to TeX mode
632
633The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
634`latex-mode'.
635
a933dad1
DL
636** Changes to RefTeX mode
637
638*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
639 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
640 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
641 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
642 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
643 can be edited from that buffer.
644
645*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
646 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
647 `A' to use all marked entries).
648
649*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
650 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
651
652*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
653 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
654 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
655 been cited.
656
38de9631
GM
657** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
658The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
659semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
660in column 1 are always made leaves.
661
a933dad1
DL
662** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
663has the following new features:
664
665*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
666may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
667to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
668time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
669
670*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
671feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
672file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
673compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
674pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
675defaults to 1.
676
b675095c
GM
677** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
678file names.
679
a933dad1
DL
680** Tooltips.
681
682Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
683mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
684can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
685
686Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
687variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
688the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
689tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
690
691** Customize changes
692
693*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
694`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
695cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
696
697*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
698Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
699default).
700
0ae51efb
GM
701*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
702between custom options. Example:
703
704 (defcustom default-input-method nil
705 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
706 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
707 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
708 :group 'mule
709 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
710 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
711
712This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
713current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
714first in a custom-set-variables statement.
715
a933dad1
DL
716** New features in evaluation commands
717
5e03eb84 718*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
719modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
720print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
721customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
722eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
723
5e03eb84
GM
724*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
725code when called with a prefix argument.
726
a933dad1
DL
727** Dired changes
728
729*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
730command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
731is, delete only empty directories.
732
733*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
734command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
735copy directories recursively.
736
f6737cde
GM
737*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
738in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
739the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
740
2f72fd2f
GM
741*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
742replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
743directory.
744
7381ae05
MB
745*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
746a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
747This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
748will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
749accurate or inaccurate as it is.
750
a933dad1
DL
751** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
752use the -f option when sending mail.
753
b1c609b1
GM
754** CC mode changes.
755
756Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
757current user setups (although it's believed that these
758incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
759However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
760back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
761compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
762release.
763
764*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
765When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
766variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
767take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
768is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
769settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
770possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
771Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
772
773By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
774special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
775the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
776of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
777above.
778
779Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
780when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
781function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
782call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
783then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
784values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
785only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
786function documentation for more info.
787
788The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
789especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
790with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
791intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
792such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
793is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
794configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
795global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
796
797(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
798
799**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
800This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
801
802This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
803variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
804completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
805the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
806empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
807style system.
808
809**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
810In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
811c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
812as far as possible.
813
814*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
815CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
816surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
817chapter about this in the manual.
818
819**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
820The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
821recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
822primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
823adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
824
825**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
826This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
827c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
828
829**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
830This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
831
832It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
833Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
834A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
835inside CC Mode.
836
837Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
838causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
839the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
840available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
841cc-mode/).
842
843**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
844The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
845specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
846literals.
847
848**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
849It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
850prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
851you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
852this function.
853
854*** Fixes to IDL mode.
855It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
856to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
857struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
858Thanks to Eric Eide.
859
860*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
861It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
862opening braces hangs and when they don't.
863
864**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
865
866*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
867See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
868better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
869and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
870
871*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
872previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
873the column specified by comment-column.
874
875*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
876In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
877is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
878prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
879contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
880don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
881
882*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
883instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
884arguments.
885
886*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
887
888*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
889c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
890c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
891variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
892Provan).
893
894*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
895
c407c570
GM
896** Makefile mode changes
897
898*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
899
900*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
901Fontlock mode is active.
902
87be76f6
GM
903** Isearch changes
904
c407c570
GM
905** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
906respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
907that started the search.
908
87be76f6 909*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
910selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
911
87be76f6
GM
912*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
913
d35fce81 914Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
915`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
916search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
917before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
918highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
919`secondary-selection'.
920
921The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
922will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
923Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
924using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
925usual snappy response.
926
927If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
928matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
929set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
930isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
931
35384f06
GM
932** Changes in sort.el
933
934The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 935as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
936new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
937numeric base.
87be76f6 938
d7b511c4
GM
939** Changes to Ange-ftp
940
941*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
942names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
943sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
944
d7b511c4
GM
945*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
946ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
947
4b9347b3
GM
948** Shell script mode changes.
949
950Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
951derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
952sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
953
79214ddf
FP
954** Etags changes.
955
956*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
957
aca0be23 958*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
959possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
960{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
961This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
962a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 963
79214ddf
FP
964*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
965declarations when given the --declarations option.
966
967*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 968"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
969
970*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
971types.
972
de370c4c 973*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
974
975*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
976
977*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
978are now tagged.
979
980*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
981variables are tagged.
982
983*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
984
8dc78b52
FP
985*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
986for PSWrap.
79214ddf 987
f6737cde
GM
988** Changes in etags.el
989
3f6e4b8b
GM
990*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
991tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
992is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
993
f6737cde
GM
994*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
995the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
996
997If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
998FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
999TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1000obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1001
1002TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1003
1004FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1005List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1006
1007A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1008
1009 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1010 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1011 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1012
1013*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1014of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1015
1016*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1017names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1018
fbc164de
PE
1019** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1020and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1021LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1022
0b8a3a6d
DL
1023** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1024Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
10258859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1026There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1027
163ea954 1028** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1029remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1030appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1031
1032** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1033
6f8ea2ae
DL
1034** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1035
c0510d27
GM
1036** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1037containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1038expression from that list, are not checked.
1039
a933dad1
DL
1040** New modes and packages
1041
31fc5d15
GM
1042*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1043parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1044
5cb6a58e
SM
1045*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1046package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1047be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1048
578979ee
GM
1049*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1050facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1051separate Texinfo file.
1052
dc1178bf
SM
1053*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1054or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1055provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1056It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1057used to enter checkin log messages.
1058
6abca616
EZ
1059*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1060without invoking external programs.
1061
1062The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1063and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1064`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1065is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1066Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1067
1068The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1069page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1070
5e5dff44
GM
1071*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1072authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1073
1074The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1075the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1076the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1077Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1078even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1079single step.
1080
1081On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1082matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1083probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1084contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1085
f7136ee8
GM
1086*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1087unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1088actually modifying content of a buffer.
1089
bbd9b566
GM
1090*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1091PostScript.
1092
1093Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1094
1095The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1096
1097 ; comment (until end of line)
1098 A non-terminal
1099 "C" terminal
1100 ?C? special
1101 $A default non-terminal
1102 $"C" default terminal
1103 $?C? default special
1104 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1105 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1106 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1107 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1108 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1109 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1110 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1111 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1112 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1113 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1114 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1115 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1116 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1117 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1118 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1119
1120Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1121
99453a38
GM
1122*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1123align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1124determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1125example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1126equal signs of assignments.
1127
559cee90
DL
1128*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1129paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1130
6448a6b3
GM
1131*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1132list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1133buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1134customize the package.
1135
6344985d
GM
1136*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1137
249652b1
GM
1138*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1139replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1140is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1141and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1142not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1143which answers different needs.
1144
3476b54a
GM
1145*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1146suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1147expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1148course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1149reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1150to be enabled.
1151
8964fec7
SM
1152*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1153containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1154
a933dad1
DL
1155*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1156
1157*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1158
1159*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1160
1161*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1162Pascal) language.
1163
1164*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1165the text at point.
1166
1167*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1168
8d54eb69
DL
1169*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1170
a933dad1
DL
1171*** whitespace.el ???
1172
ebcfda83
GM
1173*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1174files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1175(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1176interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1177often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1178uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1179codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1180
1181*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1182
1183Here is an example of columns:
1184
1185horse apple bus
1186dog pineapple car EXTRA
1187porcupine strawberry airplane
1188
1189Doing the following settings:
1190
1191 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1192 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1193 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1194 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1195
1196
1197Selecting the lines above and typing:
1198
1199 M-x delimit-columns-region
1200
1201It results:
1202
1203[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1204[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1205[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1206
1207delim-col has the following options:
1208
1209 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1210 before all columns.
1211
1212 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1213 between each column.
1214
1215 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1216 after all columns.
1217
1218 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1219 each column.
1220
1221delim-col has the following commands:
1222
1223 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1224 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1225
f507826c 1226*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1227were operated on recently.
1228
1229M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1230
31fc5d15
GM
1231M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1232recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1233
31fc5d15
GM
1234M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1235filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1236file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1237
31fc5d15
GM
1238- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1239- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1240- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1241
31fc5d15
GM
1242The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1243dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1244
8062f458
DL
1245*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1246text.
1247
36e24b82 1248*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1249of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1250specific to Message mode.
1251
36e24b82
DL
1252*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1253viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1254with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1255
aaa659ef
DL
1256*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1257interface to access directory servers using different directory
1258protocols. It has a separate manual.
1259
eee54b0e
DL
1260*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1261for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1262
612839b6
GM
1263*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1264
1265*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1266minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1267
399da7e3
DL
1268*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1269with the diary features.
1270
6e417ca5
DL
1271*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1272numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1273
4a27bdfb
GM
1274*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1275Fill mode.
1276
a933dad1
DL
1277** Withdrawn packages
1278
1279*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1280functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1281
3261c1d8
DL
1282*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1283
1284*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1285
1286\f
1287* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1288(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1289
07b14857
KH
1290** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1291without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1292convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1293
9662da0b
GM
1294** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1295or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1296
7fce7efb
DL
1297** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1298function was declared obsolete.
1299
1300** Function plist-member is renamed from widget-plist-member (which is
1301retained as an alias).
1302
f98d3086
SM
1303** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1304It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1305is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1306
87efd256
GM
1307** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1308
1309- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1310
1311Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1312MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1313
67c9a1d2
GM
1314** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1315
1316- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1317
1318Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1319
1320This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1321calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1322argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1323value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1324returned.
1325
1326Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1327if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1328it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1329minibuffer even if it is active.
1330
1331Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1332counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1333too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1334and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1335`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1336entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1337
1338ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1339ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1340ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1341ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1342ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1343If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1344Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1345
dce6b995 1346** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key
f98d3086 1347and event names in angle brackets.
dce6b995 1348
25fa6deb
GM
1349** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1350call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1351message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1352Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1353
3b4fa1b2 1354** The user option line-number-display-limit can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1355meaning no limit.
1356
c08398de
DL
1357** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1358coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1359DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1360
80c05bd3 1361** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1362of a primitive.
1363
80c05bd3
DL
1364** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1365buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1366This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1367than replacing the local map.
1368
4bc7a543
DL
1369** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1370after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1371
1372** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1373
f0298744
DL
1374** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1375promised long ago.
1376
a933dad1
DL
1377\f
1378* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1379
1380Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1381--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1382When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1383so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1384
0b8a3a6d
DL
1385*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1386`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1387when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1388multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1389
1390*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1391`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1392contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1393
1394*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1395changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1396[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1397regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1398the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1399extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1400bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1401eight-bit-graphic.
1402
1403** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1404
1405A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1406a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1407character set as previously.
1408
1409*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1410They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1411modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1412
1413CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1414characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1415range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1416case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1417
1418FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1419name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1420
1421*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1422registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1423"fontset-default".
1424
1425*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1426argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1427
1428** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1429composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1430buffers and strings.
1431
1432*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1433character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1434code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1435have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1436composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1437composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1438The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1439also been deleted.
1440
1441*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1442specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1443`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1444
1445*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1446MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1447composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1448may differ between buffer and string text.
1449
1450*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1451COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1452
1453*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1454directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1455Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1456`composition' from STRING.
1457
1458*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1459a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1460
1461*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1462obsolete.
1463
1464** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1465Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1466character set is not used.
1467
1468** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1469`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1470X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1471
1472+++
1473** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1474are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 14750xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1476
399da7e3 1477+++
f0124b4a
DL
1478** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1479that offset in the file before writing.
1480
f98d3086
SM
1481** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1482compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1483
612839b6
GM
1484** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1485`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1486from which the command was issued.
1487
1488** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1489`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1490`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1491additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1492operate on.
1493
271b4185
GM
1494** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1495to `window-buffer-height'.
1496
1497- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1498
1499Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1500The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1501lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1502
1503Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1504respectively.
1505
1506If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1507COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1508
1509The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1510obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1511on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1512
1513Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1514buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1515possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1516is currently displayed in some window.
1517
3c30cb6e
DL
1518** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1519argument function's results.
1520
62f20204
GM
1521** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1522signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1523
c0510d27
GM
1524** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1525header is the list of headers passed to it.
1526
1527** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1528ignores differences in case and text representation.
1529
1530** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1531cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1532as follows:
1533
1534 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1535 nil don't display a cursor
1536 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1537 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1538 others display a box cursor.
1539
9a0dd3dc
GM
1540** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1541an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1542defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1543set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1544
d7b511c4 1545** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1546specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1547the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1548text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1549
1550Example:
1551
1552 (string-to-syntax "()")
1553 => (4 . 41)
1554
1fa28578
GM
1555** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1556other than 10.
1557
1558*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1559INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1560
1561 #b1111
1562 => 15
1563 #b-1111
1564 => -15
1565
1566*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1567
1568 #o666
1569 => 438
1570
1571*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1572
1573 #xbeef
1574 => 48815
1575
1576*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1577
1578 #2R-111
1579 => -7
1580 #25rah
1581 => 267
1582
3d4ff2dd 1583** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1584the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1585and isn't a string.
1586
3d4ff2dd
GM
1587** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1588a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1589value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1590not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1591
16ce590d
DL
1592+++
1593** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1594
73825616 1595** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1596for a regexp in a string.
1597
1598** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1599`mouse-position-function'.
1600
723e779c
GM
1601** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1602that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1603
d1e103b2
GM
1604** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1605Keywords are now always considered constants.
1606
31047e0d
DL
1607+++
1608** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1609returns it.
1610
7a85e4df
GM
1611** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1612returned by function `recent-keys'.
1613
02b14400
RS
1614+++
1615** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1616can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1617Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1618etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1619mode.
404fa7d6 1620
02b14400 1621+++
8964fec7
SM
1622** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1623and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1624
02b14400
RS
1625+++
1626** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1627has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1628function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1629returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1630been performed."
1631
1632When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1633and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1634hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1635then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1636
02b14400 1637+++
81da8b32
GM
1638** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1639In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1640and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1641
02b14400 1642+++
9e207b90
GM
1643** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1644with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1645specified table.
1646
1647 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1648
1649Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1650TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1651saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1652what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1653
02b14400 1654+++
d7f89643 1655** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1656Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1657
02b14400 1658+++
dde9e75a
GM
1659** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1660removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1661
02b14400 1662+++
9da30515
GM
1663** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1664instead of being optional.
1665
02b14400 1666+++
d20679eb
GM
1667** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1668modify read-only text.
1669
02b14400 1670+++
fbc164de
PE
1671** New functions and variables for locales.
1672
1673The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1674decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1675time functions like strftime. The new variables
1676`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1677locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1678
1679The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1680environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1681the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1682environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1683not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1684`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1685`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1686
02b14400 1687+++
863476d1
SM
1688** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1689To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1690modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1691start sequences.
1692
02b14400 1693+++
ef6d912c
GM
1694** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1695because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1696
02b14400 1697+++
a933dad1
DL
1698** New function `propertize'
1699
1700The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1701strings with text properties.
1702
1703- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1704
1705Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1706by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1707PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1708specified value of that property. Example:
1709
1710 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1711
1712+++
1713** push and pop macros.
1714
02b14400
RS
1715Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1716are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1717as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1718
1719(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1720(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1721 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1722
02b14400
RS
1723** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1724
6c7fd5aa
RS
1725Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1726are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1727
1728(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1729 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1730 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1731 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1732
1733(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1734 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1735 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1736 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1737
a933dad1
DL
1738+++
1739** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1740as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1741
1742[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1743[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1744[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1745[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1746[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1747 space, and DEL.
1748[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1749 and DEL.
1750[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1751 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1752 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1753[:alpha:] matches letters.
1754 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1755 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1756[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1757[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1758[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1759[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1760 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1761 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1762[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1763[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1764[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1765
1766+++
1767** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1768
1769The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1770
1771- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1772
1773The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1774are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1775
1776:test TEST
1777
1778TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1779Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1780it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1781
1782:size SIZE
1783
1784SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1785many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1786
1787:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1788
1789REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1790full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1791size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
17921.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1793old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1794
1795:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1796
1797THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1798hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1799(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1800
1801:weakness WEAK
1802
1803WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1804Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1805their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1806hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1807
1808- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1809
1810Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1811
1812- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1813
1814Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1815
1816- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1817
1818Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1819values are shared.
1820
1821- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1822
1823Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1824
1825- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1826
1827Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1828
1829- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1830
1831Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1832
1833- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1834
1835Returns the size of TABLE.
1836
1837- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1838
1839Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1840
1841- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1842
1843Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1844
1845- Function: clrhash TABLE
1846
1847Clear TABLE.
1848
1849- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1850
1851Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1852not found.
1853
79214ddf 1854- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1855
1856Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1857another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1858
1859- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1860
1861Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1862
1863- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1864
1865Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1866arguments KEY and VALUE.
1867
1868- Function: sxhash OBJ
1869
1870Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1871
1872- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1873
1874Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1875a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1876comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1877and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1878of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1879
1880TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1881
1882HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1883code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1884integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1885
1886Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1887be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1888
1889 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1890 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1891
1892 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1893 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1894
79214ddf 1895 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1896 'case-fold-string-hash))
1897
1898 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1899
1900+++
1901** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1902
1903It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1904circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1905a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1906
1907+++
1908** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1909
1910If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1911#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1912
a933dad1
DL
1913+++
1914** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1915t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1916specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1917is too short to reach that column.
1918
1919+++
1920** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1921now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1922after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1923two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1924
1925If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1926perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1927and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1928
1929+++
1930** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1931to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1932
1933+++
1934** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1935calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1936
1937+++
1938** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1939directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1940small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1941small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1942temporary-file-directory instead.
1943
1944+++
1945** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1946the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1947`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1948hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1949
1950+++
1951** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1952elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1953
1954+++
1955** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1956
1957make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1958creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1959ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1960
1961+++
1962** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1963
1964The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1965on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1966is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1967never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1968ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1969overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1970
1971If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1972that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1973to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1974The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1975
1976+++
1977** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1978
1979Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1980If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1981ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1982result string.
1983
1984Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1985string where arguments appear in the result string.
1986
1987Example:
1988
1989 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1990 (s2 "world"))
1991 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1992 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1993 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1994
1995results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1996
1997+++
1998** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1999
2000Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2001The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2002argument in it.
2003
2004 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2005 (arg "world"))
2006 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2007 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2008 (message msg arg))
2009
2010+++
2011** Sound support
2012
2013Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2014(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2015
2016Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2017(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2018to enable sound support.
2019
2020Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2021list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2022when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2023functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2024sound to play, before playing the sound.
2025
2026The following sound properties are supported:
2027
2028- `:file FILE'
2029
2030FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2031searched relative to `data-directory'.
2032
6fb40beb
GM
2033- `:data DATA'
2034
2035DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2036may be present, but not both.
2037
a933dad1
DL
2038- `:volume VOLUME'
2039
2040VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
20410..1. This property is optional.
2042
2043Other properties are ignored.
2044
2045** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2046
2047** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2048a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2049
2050** Changes to garbage collection
2051
2052*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2053of live and free strings.
2054
2055*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2056strings that have been consed so far.
2057
a933dad1 2058\f
04545643
GM
2059* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2060Lisp Manual
2061
9a8d84ca
DL
2062+++
2063** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2064
2065** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2066image.
2067
2068- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2069
2070Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2071
2072SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2073measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2074character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2075font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2076FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2077
0b8a3a6d
DL
2078** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2079satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2080
2081+++
2082** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2083optional.
2084
04545643
GM
2085** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2086
2087When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2088around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2089at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2090properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2091
2092\f
a933dad1
DL
2093* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2094
2095Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2096--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2097When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2098so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2099
f6d3257b
GM
2100** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2101to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2102
2103Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2104text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2105is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2106your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2107laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2108just display it black instead.
2109
2110This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2111a line like
2112
2113 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2114
2115in your `.emacs'.
2116
a933dad1
DL
2117** New face implementation.
2118
2119Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2120font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2121
2122+++
2123*** New faces.
2124
2125Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2126
2127 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2128
a933dad1
DL
2129 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2130 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2131
a933dad1 2132 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2133
a933dad1 2134 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2135
a933dad1 2136 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2137
a933dad1 2138 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2139
a933dad1
DL
2140 7. Background color.
2141
2142 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2143
2144 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2145
2146 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2147
2148 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2149
2150 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2151 color.
2152
2153 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2154 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2155
2156Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2157same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2158frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2159faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2160with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2161attributes mentioned above.
2162
2163There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2164definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2165created frames.
79214ddf 2166
a933dad1
DL
2167A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2168have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2169`fully-specified'.
2170
2171+++
2172*** Face merging.
2173
2174The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2175combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2176aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2177properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2178that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2179results in a fully-specified face.
2180
2181+++
2182*** Face realization.
2183
2184After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2185merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2186realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2187available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2188face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2189cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2190
2191Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2192character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2193for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2194charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2195
2196Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2197specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2198being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2199the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2200statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2201
2202In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2203`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
22040x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2205the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2206initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2207Emacs.
2208
2209Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2210`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2211registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2212with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2213
2214++++
2215**** Clearing face caches.
2216
2217The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2218on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2219unused fonts.
2220
2221+++
2222*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2223
a933dad1
DL
2224Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2225given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2226for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2227
2228If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2229pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2230family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2231property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2232an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2233
2234Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2235against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2236match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2237
2238Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2239
2240The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2241attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2242face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2243names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2244that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2245width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2246to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2247
2248Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2249specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2250face doesn't exist.
2251
2252+++
2253**** Scalable fonts
2254
2255Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2256since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2257servers.
2258
2259To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2260`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2261scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2262Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2263scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2264that list. Example:
2265
2266 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2267
2268allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2269
2270+++
2271*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2272
2273- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2274
2275Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2276is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2277string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2278
2279If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2280the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2281FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2282POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2283SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2284These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2285if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2286REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2287the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2288of the face font sort order.
2289
79214ddf 2290- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2291
2292Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2293omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2294(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2295non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2296
2297- Variable: font-list-limit
2298
2299Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2300won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2301matching font. The default is currently 100.
2302
2303+++
2304*** Setting face attributes.
2305
2306For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2307with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2308implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2309`face-attribute'.
2310
2311Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2312symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2313
2314The following attributes are recognized:
2315
2316`:family'
2317
2318VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2319or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2320and `?' are allowed.
2321
2322`:width'
2323
2324VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2325It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2326`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2327`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2328
2329`:height'
2330
2331VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
23321/10 pt.
2333
2334`:weight'
2335
2336VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2337symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2338`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2339
2340`:slant'
2341
2342VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2343symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2344`reverse-oblique'.
2345
2346`:foreground', `:background'
2347
2348VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2349
2350`:underline'
2351
2352VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2353VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2354a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2355don't underline.
2356
2357`:overline'
2358
2359VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2360VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2361string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2362overline.
2363
2364`:strike-through'
2365
2366VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2367striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2368face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2369is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2370
2371`:box'
2372
2373VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2374around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2375VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2376of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2377and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2378VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2379:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2380the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2381specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2382defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2383the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2384color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2385should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2386like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2387that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2388the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2389box.
2390
2391`:inverse-video'
2392
2393VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2394inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2395
2396`:stipple'
2397
2398If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2399The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2400searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2401HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2402is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2403explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2404
2405For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2406and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2407
2408`:font'
2409
2410Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2411XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2412is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2413versions of Emacs.
2414
2415For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2416be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2417must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2418
2419Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2420`defface'.
2421
2422*** Face attributes and X resources
2423
2424The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2425from X resources:
2426
2427 Face attribute X resource class
2428-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2429 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2430 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2431 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2432 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2433 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2434 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2435 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2436 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2437 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2438 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2439 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2440 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2441 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2442 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2443 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2444 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2445 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2446 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2447 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2448
2449+++
2450*** Text property `face'.
2451
2452The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2453specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2454specification can be
2455
24561. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2457
24582. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2459 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2460 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2461 for face attribute names.
2462
24633. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2464 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2465 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2466
2467+++
2468** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2469
acf3ecb7
EZ
2470The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2471on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2472the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2473default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2474`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2475used to clear the mapping table.
2476
acf3ecb7
EZ
2477** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2478
2479The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2480and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2481type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2482color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2483display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2484old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2485`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2486compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2487should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2488modify their color-related behavior.
2489
2490The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2491any frame type.
2492
8a5719f0
EZ
2493** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2494
2495The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2496`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2497`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2498`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2499`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2500`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2501display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2502the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2503platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2504
a933dad1
DL
2505+++
2506** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2507
463cac2d 2508This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2509
2510The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2511end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2512Otherwise, it returns zero.
2513
463cac2d
GM
2514** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2515
2516There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2517buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2518text-property.
2519
9a9dfda8 2520Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2521forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2522to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2523not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2524commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2525boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2526`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2527functions.
463cac2d
GM
2528
2529Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2530a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2531editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2532
9a9dfda8
GM
2533The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2534
2535- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2536
2537Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2538A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2539If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2540constrained position if that is is different.
2541
2542If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2543positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2544ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2545constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2546as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2547is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2548fields.
2549
2550If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2551NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2552unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2553C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2554only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2555
2556- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2557
2558Erases the field surrounding POS.
2559A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2560If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2561
2562- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2563
2564Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2565A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2566If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2567If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2568field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2569
2570- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2571
2572Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2573A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2574If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2575If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2576then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2577
2578- Function: field-string &optional POS
2579
2580Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2581A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2582If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2583
2584- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2585
2586Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2587A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2588If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2589
a933dad1
DL
2590+++
2591** Image support.
2592
2593Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2594strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2595(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2596replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2597
2598If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2599`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2600AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2601window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2602area.
2603
2604IMAGE is an image specification.
2605
2606*** Image specifications
2607
2608Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2609is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2610specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2611symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2612described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2613
2614The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2615
2616`:ascent ASCENT'
2617
576da55d
GM
2618ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2619If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2620to use for its ascent.
2621
2622If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2623image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2624
04545643
GM
2625If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2626centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2627of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2628overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2629
2630`:margin MARGIN'
2631
79214ddf 2632MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2633margin around the image. Default is 0.
2634
2635`:relief RELIEF'
2636
2637RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2638around an image.
2639
2640`:algorithm ALGO'
2641
2642Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2643be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2644supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2645which is intended to display images "disabled."
2646
2647`:heuristic-mask BG'
2648
2649If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2650background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2651determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2652corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2653the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2654be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2655background of the image.
2656
2657`:file FILE'
2658
2659Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2660search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2661building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2662may be present in the image specification.
2663
518df5c4
GM
2664`:data DATA'
2665
2666Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2667supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2668present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2669support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2670
a933dad1
DL
2671*** Supported image types
2672
b246b1f6 2673**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2674
2675XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2676properties supported are
2677
2678`:foreground FG'
2679
2680FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2681is the frame's foreground.
2682
2683`:background FG'
2684
2685BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2686the frame's background color.
2687
2688XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2689case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2690instead of a `:file' property.
2691
2692`:width WIDTH'
2693
2694WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2695
2696`:height HEIGHT'
2697
2698HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2699
2700`:data DATA'
2701
2702DATA must be either
2703
2704 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2705 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2706
2707 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2708
2709 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2710 bitmap.
2711
c76e04a8
GM
2712 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2713 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2714 in the file.
2715
a933dad1
DL
2716**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2717
2718XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2719`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2720found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2721`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2722
2723Additional image properties supported are:
2724
2725`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2726
2727SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2728name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2729name.
2730
2731XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2732add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2733
a933dad1
DL
2734The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2735to display compressed images.
2736
2737**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2738
2739PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2740mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2741defined.
2742
2743**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2744
2745Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2746package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2747are:
2748
a933dad1
DL
2749**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2750
2751Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2752package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2753properties defined.
2754
2755**** GIF, image type `gif'
2756
2757Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2758`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2759
2760Additional image properties supported are:
2761
2762`:index INDEX'
2763
2764INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2765multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2766
2767This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2768For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2769at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2770every 0.1 seconds.
2771
2772(defun show-anim (file max)
2773 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2774 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2775
2776(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2777 (when (= idx max)
2778 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2779 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2780 (save-excursion
2781 (set-buffer buffer)
2782 (goto-char (point-min))
2783 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2784 (insert-image img "x"))
2785 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2786
2787**** PNG, image type `png'
2788
2789Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2790package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2791properties defined.
2792
2793**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2794
2795Additional image properties supported are:
2796
2797`:pt-width WIDTH'
2798
2799WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2800integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2801
2802`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2803
2804HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2805must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2806
2807`:bounding-box BOX'
2808
2809BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2810the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2811files. This is an required property.
2812
2813Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2814lisp/gs.el.
2815
2816*** Lisp interface.
2817
79214ddf
FP
2818The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2819which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2820
2821Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2822they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2823The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2824manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2825images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2826
2827*** Simplified image API, image.el
2828
2829The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2830creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2831can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2832define an image based on available image types. The functions
2833`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2834buffer.
2835
2836+++
2837** Display margins.
2838
2839Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2840and images.
2841
2842To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2843`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2844`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2845obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2846`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2847the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2848of the display margins.
2849
2850You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2851containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2852one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2853string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2854in this file).
2855
2856+++
2857** Help display
2858
2859Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2860moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2861`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2862that have a `help-echo' property.
2863
9662da0b 2864If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 2865is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
2866the window in which the help was found.
2867
2868If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
2869`help-echo' text property was found.
2870
2871If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
2872POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
2873
2874If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
2875the `display' property). POS is the position in that string under the
2876mouse.
d5aa31d8 2877
9662da0b
GM
2878If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
2879string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
2880
2881For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
2882determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
2883property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
2884For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
2885used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
2886
2887The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
2888the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
2889causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
2890
2891+++
2892** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2893
2894The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2895This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2896
2897The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2898scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2899The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2900scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2901used.
2902
79214ddf
FP
2903 (global-set-key [A-down]
2904 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2905 (interactive)
79214ddf 2906 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2907 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2908 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2909 #'(lambda ()
2910 (interactive)
79214ddf 2911 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2912 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2913
2914+++
2915** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2916
2917Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2918when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2919variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2920is called with one argument, POS.
2921
2922At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2923characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2924as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2925property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2926`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2927
2928+++
2929** Tool bar support.
2930
2931Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2932parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2933controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2934suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2935`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2936automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2937
2938*** Tool bar item definitions
2939
2940Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2941`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2942where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2943
a933dad1
DL
2944CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2945evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2946the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2947property (see below).
79214ddf 2948
a933dad1
DL
2949BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2950binding are currently ignored.
2951
2952The following properties are recognized:
2953
2954`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2955
a933dad1
DL
2956FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2957or disabled.
79214ddf 2958
a933dad1 2959`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2960
a933dad1 2961FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2962
a933dad1
DL
2963`:filter FUNCTION'
2964
2965FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2966FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2967used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2968
a933dad1
DL
2969`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2970
2971TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2972and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2973
a933dad1
DL
2974`:image IMAGES'
2975
2976IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2977image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2978meaning of each of the four elements:
2979
2980 Index Use when item is
2981 ----------------------------------------
2982 0 enabled and selected
2983 1 enabled and deselected
2984 2 disabled and selected
2985 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2986
4ba7246d
GM
2987If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
2988algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
2989
a933dad1 2990`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2991
a933dad1
DL
2992Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2993is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2994
2995*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2996
2997If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2998resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2999than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3000
79214ddf 3001If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3002raised when the mouse moves over them.
3003
3004You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3005`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3006pixels. Default is 1.
3007
3008You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3009`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3010
3011*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3012
3013You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3014a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3015
3016 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3017 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3018 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3019
3020is the original tool bar item definition, then
3021
3022 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3023
3024makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3025item.
3026
3027** Mode line changes.
3028
3029+++
3030*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3031
3032The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3033that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3034a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3035
30361. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3037a `local-map' text property.
3038
30392. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3040that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3041
30423. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3043is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3044`local-map' property.
3045
3046The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3047properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3048example.
3049
54522c9f
GM
3050*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3051evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3052
a933dad1
DL
3053+++
3054*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3055variable mode-line-format to nil.
3056
3057+++
3058*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3059
3060This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3061`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3062completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3063`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3064line.
3065
3066The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3067`header-line'.
3068
3069The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3070position in the header-line.
3071
3072+++
3073** Text property `display'
3074
3075The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3076also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3077`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3078below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3079
3080*** Variable width and height spaces
3081
3082To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3083specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3084`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3085area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3086marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3087displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3088simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3089
3090The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3091PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3092properties described below.
3093
3094The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3095characters having the `display' property.
3096
3097- :width WIDTH
3098
3099Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3100character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3101
3102- :relative-width FACTOR
3103
3104Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3105first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3106same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3107width of that character by FACTOR.
3108
3109- :align-to HPOS
3110
3111Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3112value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3113
3114Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3115
3116- :height HEIGHT
3117
3118Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3119normal line height.
3120
3121- :relative-height FACTOR
3122
3123The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3124of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3125
3126- :ascent ASCENT
3127
3128Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3129used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3130baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3131equal to 100.
3132
3133You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3134
3135*** Images
3136
3137A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3138. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3139in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3140their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3141the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3142`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3143area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3144the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3145as display specification.
3146
3147*** Other display properties
3148
3149- :space-width FACTOR
3150
3151Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3152should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3153integer or float.
3154
3155- :height HEIGHT
3156
3157Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3158
3159If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3160means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3161the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3162``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3163a font is available counts as a step.
3164
3165If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3166as tall as the frame's default font.
3167
3168If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3169height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3170
3171Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3172`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3173
3174- :raise FACTOR
3175
3176FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3177font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3178raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3179amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3180`:height' subproperty.
3181
3182*** Conditional display properties
3183
3184All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3185has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3186applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3187During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3188the text having the `display' property.
3189
3190The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3191`(:when t SPEC)'.
3192
3193+++
3194** New menu separator types.
3195
3196Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3197item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3198treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3199to specify other menu separator types.
3200
3201- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3202
3203No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3204separator occurs.
3205
3206- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3207
3208A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3209
3210- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3211
3212A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3213
3214- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3215
3216A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3217
3218- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3219
3220A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3221
3222- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3223
3224A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3225displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3226
3227- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3228
3229A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3230
3231- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3232
3233A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3234
3235- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3236
3237A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3238
3239- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3240
3241Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3242
3243- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3244
3245Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3246
3247- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3248
3249Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3250
3251- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3252
3253Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3254
3255Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3256the corresponding single-line separators.
3257
3258+++
3259** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3260
3261The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3262`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3263Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3264that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3265default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3266default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3267default foreground is black.
3268
3269The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3270(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3271`ScrollBarBackground').
3272
3273Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3274settings for scroll bar colors.
3275
3276+++
3277** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3278display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3279
3280---
3281** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3282starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3283on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3284line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3285the original window start.
3286
3287---
3288** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3289`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3290now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3291
3292+++
3293** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3294
3295A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3296`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3297windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3298other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3299
3300The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3301fixed-width and fixed-height.
3302
3303 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3304
3305A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3306fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3307window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3308change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3309temporarily to nil, for example
3310
3311 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3312 (enlarge-window 10))
3313
79214ddf 3314Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3315or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3316
3317** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3318terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3319to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3320overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3321horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3322support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050
DL
3323^L
3324* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3325
3326** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3327input.
3328
3329** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3330
3331** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3332
3333** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3334only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3335exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3336(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3337(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3338
3339** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3340been added.
3341
3342^L
3343* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3344
3345** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3346
e33b0397
DL
3347^L
3348* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3349
3350** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3351M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3352\f
3353* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3354
3355** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3356
3357You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3358Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3359`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3360
3361If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3362is the one that is used.
3363
3364** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3365the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3366Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3367separate from the command's regular output.
3368Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3369says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3370In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3371the buffer name.
3372
3373When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3374output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3375it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3376cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3377
3378** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3379the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3380is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3381created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3382
3383** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3384example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3385match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3386quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3387
3388** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3389now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3390if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3391they never ignore case.
3392
3393** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3394under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3395applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3396of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3397just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3398convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3399part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3400
3401If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3402the same format that was used in the file before.
3403
3404You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3405`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3406
3407** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3408renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3409This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3410
3411** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3412The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3413buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3414your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3415is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3416end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3417Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3418
3419The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3420eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3421control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3422format. You can now customize these variables.
3423
3424** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3425filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3426filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3427enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3428
3429** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3430in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3431windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3432
3433** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3434dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3435doesn't have any effect.
3436
3437** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3438not one per buffer.
3439
3440** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3441use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3442 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3443
3444** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3445To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3446`auto-show-mode' command.
3447
3448** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3449avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3450versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3451choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3452occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3453
3454** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3455cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3456
3457** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3458character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3459feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3460
3461** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3462the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3463interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3464and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3465
3466** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3467
3468The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3469that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3470one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3471codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3472set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3473
3474Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3475from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3476
3477IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3478equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3479a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3480`?' on other systems.
3481
3482IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3483feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3484Unix.
3485
3486Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3487current codepage when it starts.
3488
3489** Mail changes
3490
feab4fba
GM
3491*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3492`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3493appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3494non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3495MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3496headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3497latin-1:
3498
3499 MIME-version: 1.0
3500 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3501 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3502
a933dad1
DL
3503*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3504default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3505default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3506sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3507buffer-file-coding-system.
3508
3509You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3510sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3511mail.
3512
3513*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3514if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3515Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3516list of possible coding systems.
3517
3518** CC Mode changes
3519
3520*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3521modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3522longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3523docstring for details.
3524
3525*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3526symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3527found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3528prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3529lineup functions use this feature currently.
3530
3531*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3532"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3533
3534*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3535"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3536
3537*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3538from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3539symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3540c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3541anonymous classes.
3542
3543*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3544syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3545
3546*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3547inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3548support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3549function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3550
3551*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3552(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3553brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3554c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3555(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3556
3557*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3558
3559*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3560
3561*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3562for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3563
3564*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3565
3566*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3567associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3568This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3569circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3570class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3571
3572** Gnus changes.
3573
3574*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3575added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3576Gnus manual for the full story.
3577
3578*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3579before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3580group, which is created automatically.
3581
3582*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3583values.
3584
3585*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3586
3587*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3588outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3589
3590*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3591`C-u C-c C-c'.
3592
3593*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3594
3595*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3596re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3597
3598*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3599
3600*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3601Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3602
3603*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3604`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3605
3606*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3607control over simplification.
3608
3609*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3610
3611*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3612limit.
3613
3614*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3615
3616*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3617
79214ddf 3618*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3619If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3620rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3621
3622*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3623`a' forces normal posting method.
3624
3625*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3626-- `W d'.
3627
3628*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3629to a non-nil value.
3630
3631*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3632where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3633
3634*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3635has been added.
3636
3637*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3638
3639*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3640
3641*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3642`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3643
3644*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3645`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3646
3647*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3648
3649*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3650been added.
3651
3652*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3653`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3654
3655*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3656updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3657
3658*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3659
3660*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3661
3662*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3663
3664** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3665
3666*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3667options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3668nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3669
3670*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3671TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3672of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3673TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3674can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3675
3676*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3677All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3678but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3679the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3680
3681*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3682the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3683buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3684mismatch.
3685
3686** Changes to RefTeX mode
3687
3688*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3689file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3690
3691*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3692lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3693characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3694removed from the label.
3695
3696*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3697a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3698
3699*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3700customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3701
3702*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3703`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3704expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3705
3706*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3707
3708** New/deleted modes and packages
3709
3710*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3711SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3712
3713*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3714editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3715SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3716
3717*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3718changes with a special face.
3719
3720*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3721this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3722Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3723\f
3724* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3725
3726** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3727This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3728conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3729and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3730check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3731
3732The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3733Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3734distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3735
3736** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3737MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3738controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3739directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3740Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3741on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3742string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3743program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3744printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3745
3746** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3747output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3748available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3749input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3750temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3751program.
3752
3753An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3754and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3755programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3756automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3757as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3758ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3759
3760** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3761a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3762MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3763was not documented clearly before.
3764
3765** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3766This includes Tetris and Snake.
3767\f
3768* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3769
3770** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3771return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3772They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3773meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3774
3775** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3776WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3777and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3778
3779** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3780
3781*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3782It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3783
3784*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3785the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3786integers.
3787
3788** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3789files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3790arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3791file names and attributes are returned.
3792
3793** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3794sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3795accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3796It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3797returns the result.
3798
3799** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3800to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3801
3802** New functions for base64 conversion:
3803
3804The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3805into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3806performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3807optionally.
3808
3809Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3810job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3811
3812**
3813The new function process-running-child-p
3814will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3815terminal to its own child process.
3816
3817** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3818when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3819to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3820itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3821
3822** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3823be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3824
3825** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3826:included is an alias for :visible.
3827
3828easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3829easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3830to move or copy menu entries.
3831
3832** Multibyte editing changes
3833
3834*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3835an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3836make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3837work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3838char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3839 (setq char (sref str idx)
3840 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3841The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3842
3843If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3844(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3845 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3846
3847*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3848region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3849deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3850
3851 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3852
3853This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3854across the boundary.
3855
3856*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3857`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3858 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3859 contains 8-bit characters.
3860 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3861 contains invalid characters.
3862
3863*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3864text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3865preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3866text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3867way.
3868
3869*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3870If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3871end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3872prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3873
3874*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3875compose Thai characters in a string.
3876
3877** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3878argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3879for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3880menus should always use the third argument.
3881
3882** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3883read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3884arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3885input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3886
3887** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3888of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3889programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3890inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3891
3892** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3893the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3894returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3895echo area contents.
3896
3897 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3898
3899** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3900NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3901requested feature cannot be loaded.
3902
3903** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3904foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3905means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3906
3907** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3908gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3909
3910** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3911read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3912unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3913end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3914
3915** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3916the gap of the current buffer.
3917
3918** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3919to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3920current buffer.
3921
3922** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3923facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3924These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3925it back in after any modifications have been made.
3926\f
3927* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3928
3929** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3930the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3931/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3932directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3933subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3934
3935Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3936names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3937Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3938which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3939these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3940
3941Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3942starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3943time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3944
3945This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3946Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3947to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3948subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3949`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3950results.
3951
3952** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3953GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3954that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3955fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3956\f
3957* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3958
3959** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3960including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3961it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3962perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3963
3964** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3965specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3966region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3967further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3968command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3969within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3970are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3971region.
3972
3973In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3974selective undo.
3975
3976** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3977unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3978buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3979effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3980Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3981
3982The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3983though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3984-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3985load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3986
3987** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3988no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3989enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3990something that most users not do.
3991
3992** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3993operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3994The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3995applications.
3996
3997C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3998pasting operations.
3999
4000** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4001setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4002like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4003printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4004`ps-printer-name'.
4005
4006** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4007minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4008any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4009except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4010incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4011hits a new word.
4012
4013Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4014Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4015to be confused by TeX commands.
4016
4017You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4018correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4019clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4020of various alternative replacements and actions.
4021
4022Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4023the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4024corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4025alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4026flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4027
4028Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4029flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4030
4031** Changes in input method usage.
4032
4033Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4034the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4035respectively.
4036
4037You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4038
4039If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4040of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4041
4042The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4043that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4044
4045 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4046
4047 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4048
4049 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4050 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4051
4052 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 4053 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
4054 o When you are using a complex input method.
4055 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4056
4057If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4058input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4059and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4060setting it to t is helpful.
4061
4062The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4063
4064In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4065keys:
4066 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4067 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4068 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4069These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4070environment.
4071
4072** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4073names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4074minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4075get
4076
4077 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4078
4079which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4080
4081Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4082Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4083
4084** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4085at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4086its owner and group.
4087
4088** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4089Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4090
4091** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4092contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4093
4094** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4095which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4096in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4097by the left edge of the rectangle.
4098
4099** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4100increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4101C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4102for writing keyboard macros.
4103
4104** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4105files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4106frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4107the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4108additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4109info.
4110
4111** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4112
4113** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4114query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4115contents only.
4116
4117** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4118confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4119the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4120says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4121
4122** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4123non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4124literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4125
4126** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4127now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4128Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4129inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4130
4131** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4132failure if the command produces no output.
4133
4134** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4135manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4136the mouse.
4137
4138** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4139mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4140function and variable names.
4141
4142** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4143reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4144file-coding-system-alist.
4145
4146** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4147t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4148converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4149the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4150according to the current fontset.
4151
4152** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4153
4154The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4155that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4156nonascii-insert-offset.
4157
4158For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4159enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4160nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4161characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4162
4163** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4164an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4165
4166** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4167letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4168
4169** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4170are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4171command keys.
4172
4173** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4174user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4175
4176Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4177user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4178all variables that have documentation.
4179
4180** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4181shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4182that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4183minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4184it should show; the default is 20.
4185
4186Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4187the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4188of your input.
4189
4190** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4191all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4192recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4193argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4194the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4195Newly added options are included as well.
4196
4197If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4198then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4199for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4200
4201This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4202Customize menu.
4203
4204** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4205the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4206
4207** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4208buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4209invoked.
4210
4211** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4212that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4213The default is 1.
4214
4215** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4216syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4217new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4218(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4219sensibly.
4220
4221** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4222
4223** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4224value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4225two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4226
4227** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4228reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4229for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4230every night.
4231
7464346d
GM
4232** Desktop changes
4233
4234*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
4235the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4236
7464346d
GM
4237*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4238and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4239
a933dad1
DL
4240** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4241read and post multi-lingual articles.
4242
4243** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4244doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4245be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4246outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4247the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 4248made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
4249
4250** Mail reading and sending changes
4251
4252*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4253the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4254changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4255toggle.
4256
4257*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4258now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4259summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4260the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4261rmail-default-body-file.
4262
4263*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4264longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4265handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4266
4267*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4268it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4269is evaluated to insert the signature.
4270
4271*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4272outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4273handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4274putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4275transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4276especially interested in trying feedmail.
4277
4278feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4279feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4280provided by feedmail are:
4281
4282**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4283stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4284there is also a queue for draft messages
4285
4286**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4287be prompted for confirmation
4288
4289**** does smart filling of address headers
4290
4291**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4292the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4293can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4294
4295**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4296the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4297/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4298function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4299
4300** Dired changes
4301
4302*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4303files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4304
4305*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4306run Dired on the directory name at point.
4307
4308*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4309files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4310for a specified regexp.
4311
4312** VC Changes
4313
4314*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4315conveniently.
4316
4317*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4318faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4319Dired.
4320
4321VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4322directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4323listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4324currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4325
4326You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4327then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4328vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4329control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4330on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4331
4332All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4333is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4334`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4335the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4336`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4337
4338The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4339toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4340VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4341`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4342
4343Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4344ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4345command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4346
4347*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4348file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4349session to resolve them.
4350
4351Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4352resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4353contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4354uses as well).
4355
4356*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4357command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4358you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4359either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4360branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4361If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4362using ediff.
4363
4364** Changes in Font Lock
4365
4366*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4367are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4368use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4369unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4370compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4371
4372** Frame name display changes
4373
4374*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4375frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4376raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4377when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4378
4379*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4380frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4381menu.
4382
4383** Comint (subshell) changes
4384
4385*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4386subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4387with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4388
4389*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4390
4391C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4392that is, the line after the last line you got.
4393You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4394
4395C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4396send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4397the following line.
4398
4399C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4400which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4401previously sent input.
4402
4403C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4404it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4405as the search string.
4406
4407*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4408automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4409
4410** C mode changes
4411
4412*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4413and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4414assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4415definition.
a933dad1
DL
4416
4417*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4418(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4419Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4420style is still the default however.
4421
4422*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4423
4424*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4425are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4426them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4427
4428*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4429and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4430
4431*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4432namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4433
4434*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4435makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4436
4437*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4438c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4439
4440*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4441should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4442package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4443variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4444
4445** Changes to hippie-expand.
4446
79214ddf 4447*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4448non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4449which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4450
4451*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4452non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4453expanding dynamically.
4454
4455*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4456non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4457
4458*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4459non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4460this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4461expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4462
4463*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4464
4465** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4466
4467*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4468bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4469automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4470bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4471against the first word in the title.
4472
4473*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4474capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4475bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4476lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4477lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4478bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4479
4480*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4481generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4482replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4483bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4484
4485** Changes in vcursor.el.
4486
4487*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4488and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4489variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4490entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4491`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4492in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4493
4494*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4495Editing group once the package is loaded.
4496
4497*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4498generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4499vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4500
4501*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4502vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4503
4504** Ispell changes.
4505
79214ddf
FP
4506*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4507buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4508are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4509
4510*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4511A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4512and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4513defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4514include:
a933dad1
DL
4515
4516 o URLs are automatically skipped
4517 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4518
4519*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4520
4521** Changes to RefTeX mode
4522
4523RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4524large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4525re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4526section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4527
4528*** New recursive parser.
4529
4530The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4531entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4532recursive parser scans the individual files.
4533
4534*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4535
a933dad1
DL
4536Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4537partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4538the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4539
4540 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4541
4542*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4543
4544This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4545
4546 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4547
4548*** Using multiple selection buffers
4549
4550If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4551for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4552
4553 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4554
4555*** References to external documents.
4556
4557The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4558documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4559documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4560macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4561RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4562the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4563The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4564
4565*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4566
4567The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4568and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4569
4570Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4571the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4572
4573*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4574
4575The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4576buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4577
4578*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4579
4580The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4581contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4582`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4583have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4584enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4585at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4586more.
4587
4588*** Support for the varioref package
4589
4590The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4591
4592*** New hooks
4593
4594Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4595and citations are created. These hooks are
4596`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4597`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4598
4599*** Citations outside LaTeX
4600
4601The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4602a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4603
4604*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4605
4606The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4607fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4608fontified, use
4609
4610 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4611
4612** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4613With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4614the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4615directories that contain the same file name.
4616
4617Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4618Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4619file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4620Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4621have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4622names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4623directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4624directory.
4625
4626** New modes and packages
4627
4628*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4629It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4630it, but some do not.
4631
4632*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4633code.
4634
4635*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4636current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4637around in a buffer.
4638
4639Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4640
4641*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4642uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4643be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4644established system of notation similar to Chess.
4645
4646*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4647documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4648guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4649
4650*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4651available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4652system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4653simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4654functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4655the like.
4656
4657*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4658identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4659
4660*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4661within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4662used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4663the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4664
4665*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4666
4667 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4668 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4669 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4670 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4671 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4672 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4673 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4674 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4675 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4676 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4677 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4678
4679 Platform-specific modes:
4680
4681 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4682 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4683 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4684 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4685 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4686 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4687 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4688 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4689 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4690\f
4691* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4692
4693** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4694use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4695That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4696Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4697
4698Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4699you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4700consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4701
4702** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4703and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4704specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4705searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4706
4707** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4708multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4709character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4710environment.
4711
4712** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4713take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4714string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4715current input method for reading this one event.
4716
4717** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4718now control whether to output certain characters as
4719backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4720non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4721characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4722in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4723\f
4724* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4725
4726** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4727of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4728
4729** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4730in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4731always increases point by 1.
4732
4733The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4734considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4735
4736See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4737
4738** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4739Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4740default value changed. For example,
4741
4742 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4743 :type 'integer
4744 :group 'foo
4745 :version "20.3")
4746
79214ddf 4747 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4748 :version "20.3")
4749
4750If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4751default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4752is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4753`:version' in the top level group.
4754
4755This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4756
4757** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4758starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4759
4760However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4761symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4762support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4763to themselves.
4764
4765If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4766this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4767values whatever.
4768
4769** There is a new debugger command, R.
4770It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4771in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4772
4773** Frame-local variables.
4774
4775You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4776the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4777local bindings for that variable.
4778
4779These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4780frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4781modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4782parameter name.
4783
4784Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4785Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4786active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4787that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4788
4789It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4790clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4791very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4792through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4793
4794** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4795"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4796evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4797makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4798See the documentation in sregex.el.
4799
4800** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4801is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4802parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4803The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4804
4805** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4806If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4807
4808** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4809known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4810define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4811
4812** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4813when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4814it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4815history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4816
4817The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4818return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4819empty input.
4820
4821** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4822for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4823`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4824Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4825`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4826
4827** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4828echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4829a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4830default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4831
4832** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4833specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4834function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4835place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4836non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4837
4838** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4839If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4840up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4841end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4842
4843** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4844which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4845If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4846
4847** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4848holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4849was directed to display this buffer.
4850
4851** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4852with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4853describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4854other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4855set-window-configuration.
4856
4857** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4858window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4859positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4860windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4861
4862** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4863override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4864look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4865
4866If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4867non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4868map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4869
4870minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4871and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4872
4873** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4874except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4875
4876** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4877USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4878floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4879
4880** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4881to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4882in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4883it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4884
4885** Menu changes
4886
4887*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4888keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4889better supported.
4890
4891The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4892a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4893you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4894can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4895then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4896
4897*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4898
4899In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4900 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4901defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4902starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4903
4904The format is:
4905 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4906 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4907where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4908string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4909The supported properties include
4910
4911:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4912 item is enabled.
4913:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4914 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4915:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4916 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4917 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4918 It should return a binding to use instead.
4919:keys DESCRIPTION
4920 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4921 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4922 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4923:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4924 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4925 keyboard binding.
4926:key-sequence nil
4927 This means that the command normally has no
4928 keyboard equivalent.
4929:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4930:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4931 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4932 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4933 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4934
4935Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4936Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4937
4938(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4939
4940** New event types
4941
4942*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4943mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4944corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4945which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4946
4947 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4948
4949where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4950same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4951indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4952negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4953the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4954forward, away from the user.
4955
4956As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4957
4958*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4959files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4960and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4961filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4962loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4963
4964 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4965
4966where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4967same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4968that were dragged and dropped.
4969
4970As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4971
4972** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4973
4974*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4975any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4976to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4977
4978*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4979can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4980that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4981
4982*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4983in Emacs 19 and before.
4984
4985The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4986The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4987
4988*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4989buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4990unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4991representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4992
4993This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4994as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4995viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4996one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4997will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4998
4999This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5000representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5001(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5002consistent with the new representation.
5003
5004*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5005representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5006about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5007however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5008
5009The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5010nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5011using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5012
5013*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5014representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5015representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5016
5017The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5018loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5019is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5020
5021*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5022which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5023
5024*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5025which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5026
5027*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5028portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5029so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5030You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5031
5032*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5033it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5034
5035*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5036convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5037buffer or string being searched.
5038
5039One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5040[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5041searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5042searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5043obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5044you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5045expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5046
5047*** Structure of coding system changed.
5048
5049All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5050by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5051which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5052as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5053vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5054your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5055define-coding-system-alias.
5056
5057The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5058the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5059access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5060pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5061character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5062safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5063'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5064`iso-8859-1'.
5065
5066Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5067The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5068coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5069(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5070
5071Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5072also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5073are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5074the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5075
5076*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5077proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5078This function requires a user interaction.
5079
5080*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5081find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5082select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5083systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5084a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5085select-safe-coding-system.
5086
5087*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5088decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5089last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5090was done.
5091
5092*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5093used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5094coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5095
5096*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5097return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5098characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5099`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5100
5101*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5102coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5103coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5104converted.
5105
5106*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5107coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5108
5109*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5110character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5111character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5112each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5113either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5114range of characters.
5115
5116*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5117Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5118
5119*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5120in the current buffer at position POS.
5121
5122*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5123input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5124function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5125character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5126event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5127binding input-method-function to nil.
5128
5129The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5130method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5131input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5132the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5133not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5134
5135The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5136subsequent events of a key sequence.
5137
5138*** You can customize any language environment by using
5139set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5140
5141The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5142customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5143instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5144environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5145exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5146\f
5147* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5148
5149** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5150options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5151at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5152tree structure.
5153
5154M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5155user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5156
5157With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5158session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5159in your .emacs file.)
5160
5161** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5162You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5163
5164** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5165This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5166
5167** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5168immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5169kills the region.
5170
5171The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5172delete the character before point, as usual.
5173
5174** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5175on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5176by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5177
5178** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5179insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5180the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5181onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5182history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5183past.)
5184
5185** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5186This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5187in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5188TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5189makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5190
5191As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5192and is an alias for it.
5193
5194If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5195use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5196
5197** Scrolling changes
5198
5199*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5200position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5201
5202In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5203on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5204where it started.
5205
5206*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5207move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5208screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5209does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5210
5211*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5212top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5213comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5214recenters the window.
5215
5216** International character set support (MULE)
5217
5218Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5219including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5220Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5221Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5222features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5223MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5224
5225Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5226coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5227character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5228variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5229into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5230
5231Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5232generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5233supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5234language, to make it possible to type them.
5235
5236The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5237character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5238
5239The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5240to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5241
5242You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5243
5244 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5245
5246Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5247characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5248argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5249already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5250characters for their work until they want to change.
5251
5252*** Input methods
5253
5254An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5255specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5256has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5257the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5258support several input methods.
5259
5260The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5261another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5262work.
5263
5264A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5265characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5266composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5267consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5268sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5269letter.
5270
5271The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5272by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5273First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5274marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5275mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5276
5277None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5278they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5279phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5280converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5281
5282Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5283word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5284typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5285the first guess is wrong.
5286
5287*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5288turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5289
5290If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5291byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5292they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5293the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5294
5295However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5296use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5297includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5298translate automatically to and from either one.
5299
5300*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5301
5302Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5303file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5304sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5305what you want.
5306
5307If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5308example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5309system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5310multibyte characters in that buffer.
5311
5312If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5313character conversion as well.
5314
5315*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5316
5317A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5318Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5319requires using many fonts.
5320
5321Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5322collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5323
5324A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5325the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5326have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5327you would use a font.
5328
5329If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5330specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5331display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5332
5333The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5334(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5335characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5336or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5337and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5338
5339*** Defining fontsets.
5340
5341Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5342chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5343with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5344
5345Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5346of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5347`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5348standard fontset are created automatically.
5349
5350If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5351argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5352FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5353with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5354name is `fontset-startup'.
5355
5356Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5357The resource value should have this form:
5358 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5359FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5360 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5361 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5362 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5363The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5364of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5365CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5366FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5367
5368Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5369last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5370You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5371
5372For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5373font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5374following resource,
5375 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5376the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5377 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5378Here is the substitution rule:
5379 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5380 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5381 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5382 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5383 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5384
5385The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5386fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5387that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5388
5389With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5390like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5391name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5392fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5393fontsets.
5394
5395*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5396defaults for a particular choice of language.
5397
5398Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5399method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5400visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5401already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5402language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5403system for new files that you create.
5404
5405It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5406set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5407whole Emacs session.
5408
5409For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5410chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5411with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5412
5413*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5414specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5415specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5416the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5417coding systems that Emacs supports.
5418
5419*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5420lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5421This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5422After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5423is used for *the immediately following command*.
5424
5425So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5426write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5427
5428If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5429then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5430
5431For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5432visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5433
5434*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5435construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5436to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5437specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5438of the file.
5439
5440*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5441the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5442code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5443translated into that character code.
5444
5445This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5446various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5447
5448By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5449
5450*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5451the coding system for keyboard input.
5452
5453Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5454with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5455some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5456
5457By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5458
5459Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5460input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5461translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5462to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5463designed to work with terminals.
5464
5465*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5466specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5467This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5468has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5469translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5470in the corresponding buffer.
5471
5472By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5473
5474*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5475to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5476It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5477
5478*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5479an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5480command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5481want to use.
5482
5483C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5484method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5485
5486*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5487layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5488remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5489which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5490
5491*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5492the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5493related information.
5494
5495*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5496HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5497scripts.
5498
5499*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5500information about the support for a particular language.
5501You specify the language as an argument.
5502
5503*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5504the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5505first dash.
5506
5507A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5508(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5509whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
55101 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5511
5512 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5513 B big5 (Chinese)
5514 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5515 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5516 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5517 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5518 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5519 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5520 K euc-korea (Korean)
5521 R koi8 (Russian)
5522 Q tibetan
5523 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5524 T lao
5525 T tis620 (Thai)
5526 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5527 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5528 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5529 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5530 z hz (Chinese)
5531
5532When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5533two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5534coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5535keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5536
5537*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5538conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5539
5540When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5541into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5542rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5543Rmail files themselves.
5544
5545*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5546conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5547
5548Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5549for sending mail:
5550
5551- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5552- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5553- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5554 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5555- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5556
5557*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5558to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5559Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5560translations.
5561
5562** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5563of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5564insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5565without any conversion.
5566
5567** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5568You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5569RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5570any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5571
5572** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5573functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5574
5575Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5576Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5577
5578Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5579mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5580
5581** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5582complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5583in the buffer before point.
5584
5585With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5586symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5587you are using.
5588
5589With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5590just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5591
5592** File locking works with NFS now.
5593
5594The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5595in the same directory as FILENAME.
5596
5597This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5598works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5599can become a bottleneck.
5600
5601The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5602does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5603create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5604file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5605rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5606so useful that the change is worth while.
5607
5608When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5609are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5610collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5611tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5612
5613** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5614it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5615show-paren-mode.
5616
5617** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5618selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5619delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5620
5621** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5622within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5623complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5624
5625** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5626it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5627set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5628
5629** Changes in View mode.
5630
5631*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5632Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5633
5634*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5635view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5636
5637*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5638previous state.
5639
5640*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5641scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5642
5643*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5644non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5645not just the selected window.
5646
5647*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5648read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5649turns View mode on or off.
5650
5651*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5652how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5653delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5654
5655** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5656now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5657
5658** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5659has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5660presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5661which version to compare with.
5662
5663** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5664blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5665
5666The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5667is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5668isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5669shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5670
5671By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5672of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5673blocks, all of them or none.
5674
5675** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5676current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5677confirmation first.
5678
5679** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5680now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5681However, the mode will not be changed if
5682(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5683(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5684 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5685(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5686
5687This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5688
5689However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5690these commands do not change the major mode.
5691
5692** M-x occur changes.
5693
5694*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5695it performs a case-sensitive search.
5696
5697*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5698if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5699using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5700
5701** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5702in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5703window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5704that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5705buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5706
5707** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5708after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5709appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5710come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5711
5712** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5713selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5714buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5715
5716** Outline mode changes.
5717
5718*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5719
5720*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5721
5722** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5723you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5724Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5725was already active.
5726
5727The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5728unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5729get confused by it.
5730
5731If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5732set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5733
5734** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5735
5736*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5737conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5738character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5739including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5740
5741The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5742mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5743copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5744
5745*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5746are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5747values.
5748
5749`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5750case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5751`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5752case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5753
5754** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5755certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5756can be. The default value is 30.
5757
5758** Changes in Mail mode.
5759
5760*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5761Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5762composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5763`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5764`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5765behavior.
5766
5767C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5768compose-mail-other-frame.
5769
5770*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5771the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5772replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5773buffer that shows the original message.
5774
5775*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5776with separator lines around the contents.
5777
5778*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5779in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5780definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5781need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5782
5783*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5784
5785**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5786for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5787controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5788Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5789
5790**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5791to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5792/etc/passwd.
5793
5794**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5795to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5796/etc/passwd.
5797
5798** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5799special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5800directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5801reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5802
5803Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5804when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5805be taken to be magic.
5806
5807** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5808files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5809available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5810
5811M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5812(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5813
5814** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5815suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5816
5817In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5818
5819new key dired.el binding old key
5820------- ---------------- -------
5821 * c dired-change-marks c
5822 * m dired-mark m
5823 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5824 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5825 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5826 * u dired-unmark u
5827 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5828 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5829 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5830 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5831 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5832 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5833
5834** Rmail changes.
5835
5836*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5837saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5838chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5839each time you run it.
5840
5841*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5842whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5843
5844*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5845messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5846means to move in the opposite direction.
5847
5848*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5849you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5850
5851*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5852just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5853It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5854can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5855for output.
5856
5857** Gnus changes.
5858
5859*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5860
79214ddf
FP
5861*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5862Gnus.
a933dad1 5863
79214ddf 5864*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5865`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5866
5867*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5868article mode line.
5869
5870*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5871
5872*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5873
5874(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5875
5876*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5877are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5878`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5879
5880*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5881
5882*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5883
5884*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5885See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5886
5887*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5888Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5889used to pick articles.
5890
5891*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5892another have been added.
5893
5894 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5895
5896*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5897generating lines in buffers.
5898
5899*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5900`M-C-_'.
5901
5902*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5903
5904*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5905
5906 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5907
5908*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5909
a933dad1
DL
5910 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5911
5912*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5913Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5914
5915*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5916the native server.
5917
5918 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5919
5920*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5921(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5922
5923*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5924
5925*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5926even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5927
5928*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5929(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5930
5931 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5932 a group.
5933
5934*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5935sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5936
5937 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5938
5939*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5940
5941 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5942
5943*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5944
a933dad1
DL
5945 Use the `Y c' command.
5946
5947*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5948
5949*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5950
5951 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5952
5953*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5954from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5955
a933dad1
DL
5956 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5957
5958*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5959
5960*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5961the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5962
5963 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5964
5965Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5966and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5967from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5968hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5969this issue.)
5970
5971Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5972automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5973particular news group. This can be done by:
5974
5975 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5976
5977Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5978of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5979"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5980system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5981for reading and posting).
5982
5983CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5984 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5985Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5986newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5987there.
5988
5989Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5990default. Here are some of these default settings:
5991
5992 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5993 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5994 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5995 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5996 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5997
5998When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5999the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6000
6001** CC mode changes.
6002
6003*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6004code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6005values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6006this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6007Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6008loaded.
6009
6010If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 6011Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 6012style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
6013share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6014c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
6015must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6016
6017*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6018of the current buffer.
6019
6020*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6021it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6022of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6023
6024*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6025style that the Python developers like.
6026
6027*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6028This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6029just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6030
6031** VC Changes [new]
6032
6033** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6034name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6035directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6036
6037This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6038master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6039developers.
6040
6041You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6042RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6043
6044*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6045other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6046writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6047calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6048
6049*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6050version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6051
6052** Calendar changes.
6053
6054A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6055of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6056for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6057
6058** ps-print changes
6059
79214ddf 6060There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
6061
6062*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6063
6064The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6065formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6066`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6067`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6068It defaults to `letter'.
6069If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6070
6071The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 6072of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
6073non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6074
6075The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6076It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 6077It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
6078
6079*** Horizontal layout
6080
6081The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6082`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6083All are measured in points.
6084
6085*** Vertical layout
6086
6087The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6088`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6089All are measured in points.
6090
6091*** Headers
6092
6093If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6094`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6095margin above the text.
6096
79214ddf 6097If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
6098framing box is printed around the header.
6099
6100The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6101`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6102
79214ddf
FP
6103The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6104`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
6105`ps-header-font-size'.
6106
6107*** Font managing
6108
6109The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6110used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6111`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6112elements to this alist.
6113
79214ddf 6114The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
6115for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6116
6117** hideshow changes.
6118
6119*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 6120C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
6121
6122*** Support for java-mode added.
6123
6124*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6125in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6126
6127*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6128the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6129way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6130
6131*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6132robust and a lot faster.
6133
79214ddf 6134*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
6135
6136*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6137to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6138documentation for more details.
6139
6140** Changes in Enriched mode.
6141
6142*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6143filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6144of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6145use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6146the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6147
6148*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6149distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6150as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6151as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6152
6153** Font Lock mode
6154
6155*** Custom support
6156
6157The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6158font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6159faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6160group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6161your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6162consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6163
6164You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6165
6166*** Maximum decoration
6167
6168Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6169default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6170of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6171supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6172to get the old behavior.
6173
6174*** New support
6175
6176Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6177
6178Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6179support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6180
6181*** Configurable support
6182
6183Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6184additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6185c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6186java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6187list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6188of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6189convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6190
6191Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6192way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6193it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6194
6195*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6196
6197You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6198highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6199for any mode.
6200
6201For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6202
6203 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6204
6205in your ~/.emacs.
6206
6207*** New faces
6208
6209Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6210font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6211distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6212to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6213
6214*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6215
6216The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6217cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6218same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6219
6220*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6221
6222The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6223according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6224the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6225non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6226refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6227the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6228Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6229
6230This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6231For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6232this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6233refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6234containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6235the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6236
6237As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6238
6239Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6240Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6241Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6242new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6243
6244If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6245settings.
6246
6247** Ada mode changes.
6248
6249*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6250If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6251procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6252you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6253stubs.
6254
6255*** There are two new commands:
6256 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6257 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6258
6259The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6260`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 6261`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
6262
6263*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6264is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6265Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6266
6267*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6268formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6269places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6270space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6271
6272** Scheme mode changes.
6273
6274*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6275mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6276for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6277with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6278have any effect.
6279
6280If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6281still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6282scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6283variables as buffer-local variables.
6284
6285*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6286Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6287
133c9e59
GM
6288** Changes to the emacsclient program
6289
875c1439
GM
6290*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6291USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6292associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6293can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6294
133c9e59 6295*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6296it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6297buffer in Emacs.
6298
133c9e59
GM
6299*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6300use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6301ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6302option takes precedence.
6303
a933dad1
DL
6304** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6305constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6306(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6307
6308** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6309which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6310the current defun.
6311
6312** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6313following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6314
6315** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6316and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6317necessary).
6318
6319** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6320if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6321these register values no longer become completely useless.
6322If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6323asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6324it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6325
6326** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6327example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6328be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6329you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6330
6331You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6332variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6333file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6334revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6335only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6336
6337** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6338since it applies only to the current frame.
6339
6340** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6341file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6342and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6343
6344This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6345multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6346variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6347tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6348instead of just the file you are editing.
6349
6350** RefTeX mode
6351
6352RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6353and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6354different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6355multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6356turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6357
79214ddf 6358C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6359 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6360 knows which kind of label is needed.
6361
6362C-c ) reftex-reference
6363 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6364 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6365
6366C-c [ reftex-citation
6367 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6368 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6369
6370C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6371 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6372
6373C-c = reftex-toc
6374 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6375 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6376
a933dad1
DL
6377Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6378commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6379Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6380reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6381C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6382
6383** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6384
6385*** Info documentation is now available.
6386
6387*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6388both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6389
6390*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6391bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6392
6393*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6394(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6395
6396*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6397entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6398appropriate functions.
6399
6400*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6401entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6402
6403*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6404been cleaned.
6405
6406*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6407bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6408
6409*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6410shall be delimited.
6411
6412*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6413bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6414bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6415
6416*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6417field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6418prefixed with `ALT'.
6419
6420*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6421bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6422formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6423documentation).
6424
6425*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6426documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6427for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6428
6429*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6430comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6431
6432*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6433alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6434signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6435
6436*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6437
6438*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6439
6440*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6441from alien sources.
6442
6443*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6444to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6445crossref entries.
6446
6447*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6448region.
6449
6450*** Added support for imenu.
6451
6452*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6453of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6454`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6455`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6456
6457*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6458from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6459
6460** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6461
30a009a5 6462** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6463
a933dad1
DL
6464** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6465functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6466Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6467as an argument.
6468
6469When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6470and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6471
6472** browse-url changes
6473
6474*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6475Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6476(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6477non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6478customization variables.
6479
6480*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6481
6482*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6483lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6484(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6485
6486** Changes in Ediff
6487
6488*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6489pops up the Info file for this command.
6490
6491*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6492the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6493merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6494directories).
6495
6496*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6497and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6498files in the same directory.
6499
6500*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6501The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6502related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6503
6504** Changes in Viper
6505
6506*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6507*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6508 instead of vip-.
6509*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6510*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6511Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6512*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6513*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6514*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6515color when Viper is in insert state.
6516*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6517Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6518viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6519
6520** Etags changes.
6521
6522*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6523default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6524Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6525variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6526not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6527
6528*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6529
6530*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6531constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6532
6533*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6534recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6535In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6536
6537*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6538C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6539recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6540methods and protocols.
6541
6542*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6543.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6544column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6545paragraph name.
6546
6547*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6548an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6549at least M times and as many as N times.
6550
6551** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6552in files has changed slightly.
6553
6554With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6555time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6556This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6557with old time-stamp-format values.
6558
6559In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6560(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6561This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6562reasons.
6563
6564In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6565natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6566fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6567(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6568time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6569specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6570
6571Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6572case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6573truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6574
6575The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6576being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6577future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6578recommended now will continue to work then.
6579
6580See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6581details.
6582
6583** There are some additional major modes:
6584
6585dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6586m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6587meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6588
6589** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6590copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6591into Emacs.
6592
6593** New Lisp packages include:
6594
6595*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6596
6597*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6598be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6599
6600*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6601
6602*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6603in shell buffers.
6604
6605*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6606See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6607and `elint-defun'.
6608
6609*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6610meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6611ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6612strings or comments.
6613
6614These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6615abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6616you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6617insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6618at these points.
6619
6620*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6621can visit them by short forms of their names.
6622
6623*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6624Emacs Lisp function at point.
6625
6626*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6627
6628*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6629switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6630
6631*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6632
6633*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6634
6635*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6636
6637*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6638from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6639
6640*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6641You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6642inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6643original place after inserting the copy.
6644
6645*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6646on the buffer.
6647
6648You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6649velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6650(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6651
6652Enable mouse-drag with:
6653 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6654-or-
6655 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6656
6657*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6658mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6659
6660*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6661It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6662
6663*** ogonek
6664
6665The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6666Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6667platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6668TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6669ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6670prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6671instance) and vice versa.
6672
6673To use this package load it using
6674 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6675Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6676 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6677 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6678The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6679ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6680
6681*** Interface to ph.
6682
6683Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6684
6685The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6686services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6687these servers.
6688
6689*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6690
6691*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6692You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6693while the real cursor does not move.
6694
6695*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6696for visiting your favorite web sites.
6697
6698*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6699so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6700
6701** movemail change
6702
6703Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6704mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6705supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6706user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6707
6708This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6709\f
6710* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6711
6712** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6713
6714Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6715end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6716Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6717file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6718file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6719
6720To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6721C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6722coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6723specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6724LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6725save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6726\f
6727* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6728
6729** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6730Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6731vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6732Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6733
6734** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6735to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6736
6737In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6738don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6739"win".
6740
6741** Basic Lisp changes
6742
6743*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6744evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6745
6746*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6747be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6748or by the user.
6749
6750The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6751
6752*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6753
6754(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6755(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6756
6757*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6758usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6759its argument.
6760
6761*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6762
6763*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6764
6765*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6766
6767*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6768error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6769include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6770`format' function.
6771
6772*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6773or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6774whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6775
6776*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6777either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6778adding one of these suffixes.
6779
6780*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6781which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6782If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6783
6784We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6785because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6786
6787*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6788
6789*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6790You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6791
6792*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6793conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6794
6795 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6796
6797BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6798BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6799
6800*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6801choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6802restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6803works using `save-current-buffer'.
6804
6805*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6806write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6807of the last form.
6808
6809*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6810which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6811last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6812as the last form.
6813
6814*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6815characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6816matches.
6817
6818For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6819
6820*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6821with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6822Then it returns that string.
6823
6824For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6825
6826(with-output-to-string
6827 (princ "The buffer is ")
6828 (princ (buffer-name)))
6829
6830returns "The buffer is foo".
6831
6832** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6833is non-nil.
6834
6835These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6836buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6837characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6838
6839*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6840a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6841
6842Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6843character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6844Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6845position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6846characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6847 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6848
6849ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6850Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6851non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6852characters".
6853
6854The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6855through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6856"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6857range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6858leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6859
6860*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6861(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6862multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6863character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6864
6865This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6866always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6867
6868However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6869
a933dad1
DL
6870*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6871because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6872have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6873the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6874guaranteed.
6875
6876*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6877between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6878character).
6879
6880When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6881
6882 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6883 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6884 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6885 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6886 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6887
6888*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6889
6890*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6891`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6892more than the number of characters.
6893
6894You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6895it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6896\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6897is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6898follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6899newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6900
6901*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6902and returns a string containing those characters.
6903
6904*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6905(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6906counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6907character, sref signals an error.
6908
6909*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6910in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6911string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6912
6913*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6914in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6915region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6916
6917*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6918the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6919to a vector of the characters in it.
6920
6921*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6922of a string. You call it as follows:
6923
6924 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6925
6926This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6927STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6928This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6929Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6930it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6931
6932*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6933if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6934
6935*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6936if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6937
6938*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6939to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6940not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6941which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6942
6943(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6944
6945This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6946
6947The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6948If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6949are not included in the resulting value.
6950
6951The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6952at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6953WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6954is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6955
6956If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6957place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6958character extends across that column), then the padding character
6959PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6960string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6961column START-COLUMN.
6962
6963*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6964the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6965necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6966difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6967changed text, before the change.
6968
6969*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6970sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6971one character set for each script, not for each language.
6972
6973**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6974
6975**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6976
6977**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6978set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6979
6980**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6981name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6982which identify the character within that character set.
6983
6984**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6985byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6986opposite of split-char.
6987
6988**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6989of all the characters between BEG and END.
6990
6991**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6992of all the characters in a string.
6993
6994*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6995and specifying coding systems.
6996
6997**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6998system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6999of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7000(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7001and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7002as what to do about code conversion.)
7003
7004**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7005name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7006
7007**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7008for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7009except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7010
7011Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7012which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7013to match against a file name.
7014
7015VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7016a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7017decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7018to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7019systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7020specifies the coding system for encoding.
7021
7022If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7023or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7024
7025**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7026the coding system to use for network sockets.
7027
7028Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7029which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7030either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7031service names.
7032
7033VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7034a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7035decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7036to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7037systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7038specifies the coding system for encoding.
7039
7040If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7041or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7042
7043**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7044for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7045except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7046start the subprocess.
7047
7048**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7049systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7050when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7051(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7052to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7053
7054**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7055coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7056subprocess.
7057
7058It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7059but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7060start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7061connection permanently or until overridden.
7062
7063The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7064file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7065network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7066coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7067It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7068system for one operation at a time.
7069
7070**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7071files, subprocesses or network connections.
7072
7073**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7074coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7075The value is a cons cell,
7076 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7077where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7078the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7079input to the subprocess.
7080
7081**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7082change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7083
7084** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7085customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7086you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7087
7088You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7089variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7090information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7091legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7092customization.
7093
7094Thus, instead of writing
7095
7096 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7097 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7098
7099you would now write this:
7100
7101 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7102 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7103 :type 'boolean
7104 :group foo)
7105
7106The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7107two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7108describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7109for a description of them.
7110
7111The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7112should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7113
7114 (defgroup ispell nil
7115 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7116 :group 'processes)
7117
7118The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7119group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7120but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7121to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7122second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7123
7124Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7125package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7126have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7127package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7128first-level subgroups.
7129
7130** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7131
7132This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7133separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7134
7135** easy-mmode
7136
7137The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7138developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7139only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7140predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7141`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7142`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7143
7144** Text property changes
7145
7146*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7147text property.
7148
7149*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7150previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7151place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7152functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7153starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7154
7155If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7156LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7157of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7158position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7159
7160*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7161value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7162is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7163
7164** Changes in invisibility features
7165
7166*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7167hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7168is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7169should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7170would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7171make the overlay visible.
7172
7173During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7174invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7175needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7176which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7177the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7178t when it should hide it.
7179
7180*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7181
7182Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
7183invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7184and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 7185Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 7186manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
7187Here is an example of how to do this:
7188
7189 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 7190 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 7191 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 7192 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
7193
7194 ...
7195 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7196
7197 ...
7198 ;; When done with the overlays:
7199 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7200 ;; Or respectively:
7201 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7202
7203** Changes in syntax parsing.
7204
7205*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7206`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7207obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7208`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7209
7210If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7211is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7212used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7213
7214When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7215character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7216
7217 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7218 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7219
7220 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7221 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7222 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7223
7224 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7225 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7226 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7227 determine the syntax type of the character.
7228
7229 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7230 of the current buffer.
7231
7232*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7233value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7234for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7235
7236*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7237and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7238only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7239character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7240another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7241
7242These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7243text property.
7244
7245*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7246arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7247of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7248
7249*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7250(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7251element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7252nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7253string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7254
7255*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7256syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7257`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7258
7259** Changes in face features
7260
7261*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7262if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7263
7264*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7265of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7266
7267*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7268set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7269
7270*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7271set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7272
7273*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7274by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7275and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7276the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7277overlay property).
7278
7279This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7280arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7281
7282** Changes in file-handling functions
7283
7284*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7285directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7286they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7287is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7288
7289This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7290begins with ~.
7291
7292*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7293it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7294
7295*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7296the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7297
7298*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7299as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7300
7301*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7302character code conversion as well as other things.
7303
7304Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7305(formerly it did not).
7306
7307*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7308environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7309
7310*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7311instead of constant strings.
7312
7313*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7314to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7315any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7316
7317substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7318in the same way as before.
7319
7320*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7321The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7322which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7323
7324*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7325error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7326else, and returns nil.
7327
7328*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7329directory cannot be listed.
7330
7331** Changes in minibuffer input
7332
7333*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7334read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7335additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7336argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7337ways:
7338
7339 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7340 It is available through the history command M-n.
7341
7342*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7343read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7344argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7345minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7346enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7347
7348In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7349argument in this way.
7350
7351*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7352from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7353minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7354
7355** Echo area features
7356
7357*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7358echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7359minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7360after the echo area is cleared.
7361
7362*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7363in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7364
7365** Keyboard input features
7366
7367*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7368set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7369
7370*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7371received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7372by keyboard macros.
7373
7374** Frame-related changes
7375
7376*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7377creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7378hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7379
7380*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7381the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7382has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7383
7384*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7385selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7386value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7387in the selected frame.
7388
7389*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7390is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7391which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7392
7393** X Windows features
7394
7395*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7396x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7397x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7398
7399*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7400The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7401
7402*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7403MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7404A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7405
7406If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7407it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7408
7409** Subprocess features
7410
7411*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7412functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7413automatically.
7414
7415*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7416and returns the output from the command as a string.
7417
7418*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7419and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7420
7421** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7422does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7423
7424** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7425at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7426goes after the other menu items.
7427
7428** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7429of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7430around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7431are in use.
7432
7433The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7434series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7435
7436Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7437after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7438form.
7439
7440** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7441is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7442but its hook is still run.
7443
7444** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7445for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7446
7447If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7448regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7449useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7450
7451This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7452are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7453filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7454warned.
7455
7456** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7457way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7458
7459** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7460integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7461functions like display-time.
7462
7463** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7464name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7465
7466** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7467can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7468is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7469
7470** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7471if there is an error in compilation.
7472
7473** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7474switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7475argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7476they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7477
7478** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7479Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7480the *scratch* buffer.
7481
7482** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7483The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7484where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7485e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7486
7487** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7488and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7489It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7490
7491** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7492using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7493variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7494and compose-mail-other-frame.
7495
7496** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7497can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7498full name of the specified user will be returned.
7499
7500** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7501of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7502where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7503in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7504option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7505files at all.
7506
7507** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7508and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7509width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7510the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7511
7512For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7513minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7514with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7515is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7516
7517** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7518
7519** imenu.el changes.
7520
7521You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7522item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7523
7524An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7525#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7526select one of those items.
7527\f
7528* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7529\f
7530* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7531
7532** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7533mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7534
7535** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7536use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7537Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7538\f
7539* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7540
7541** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7542To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7543
7544** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7545conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7546matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7547expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7548word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7549all caps.
7550
7551** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7552at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7553
7554When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7555does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7556as in previous Emacs versions.
7557
7558** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7559non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7560time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7561frames.
7562
7563** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7564if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7565This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7566Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7567accident.
7568
7569** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7570keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7571It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7572line and then executing the macro.
7573
7574This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7575
7576** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7577(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7578characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7579characters.
7580
7581** Font Lock mode
7582
7583*** Font Lock support modes
7584
7585Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7586below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7587hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7588to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7589Font Lock mode is enabled.
7590
7591For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7592
7593 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7594
7595in your ~/.emacs.
7596
7597*** lazy-lock
7598
7599The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7600only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7601becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7602Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7603occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7604buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7605Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7606
7607To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7608
7609 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7610
7611To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7612
7613** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7614
7615*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7616paren and key.
7617
7618*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7619supported.
7620
7621** Gnus changes.
7622
7623Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7624commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7625significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7626previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7627
7628Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7629between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7630
79214ddf 7631*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7632variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7633obsolete.
7634
7635*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7636missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7637
7638 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7639
7640*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7641
7642 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7643
7644*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7645referred.
a933dad1
DL
7646
7647*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7648
7649 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7650
7651*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7652
7653 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7654
7655*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7656buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7657
7658 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7659
7660*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7661
7662 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7663
7664*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7665
7666 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7667
7668*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7669
7670 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7671
7672*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7673is possible.
7674
7675 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7676
7677*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7678groups of groups.
7679
7680*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7681
7682*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7683batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7684
7685*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7686
7687*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7688
7689*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7690
7691 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7692
7693*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7694expiration times.
7695
7696*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7697
7698*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7699process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7700
7701*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7702articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7703bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7704
7705*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7706articles with the `*' command.
7707
7708*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7709
7710*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7711
7712 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7713
7714*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7715
79214ddf 7716*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7717`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7718
7719*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7720buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7721
7722*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7723
7724*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7725
7726*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7727
7728 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7729
79214ddf 7730*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7731
7732 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7733
79214ddf 7734*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7735
7736*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7737
79214ddf 7738*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7739
79214ddf 7740 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7741 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7742
7743*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7744refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7745
7746 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7747
7748*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7749buffer to allow easier treatment.
7750
7751*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7752
7753*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7754
7755 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7756
7757*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7758articles.
a933dad1
DL
7759
7760 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7761
79214ddf 7762*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7763
7764*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7765cited text to hide is now customizable.
7766
7767 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7768
7769*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7770
7771 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7772
7773*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7774
7775*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7776
7777The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7778in greater detail.
7779\f
7780* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7781
7782** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7783second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7784asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7785exists.
7786
7787** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7788as well as lists.
7789
7790** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7791of a given keymap.
7792
7793** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7794given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7795keymap or nil.
7796
7797** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7798an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7799name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7800menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7801equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7802alias.
7803\f
7804* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7805
7806** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7807
7808Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7809This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7810was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7811far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7812pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7813
7814For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7815you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7816`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7817
7818** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7819
7820The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7821do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7822It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7823much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7824chapter of the manual for details.
7825
7826However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7827customization variables take effect.
7828
7829** Marking with the mouse.
7830
7831When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7832highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7833using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7834
7835** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7836
7837*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7838
7839*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7840to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7841
7842*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7843in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7844you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7845application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7846applications, these problems are significant.
7847
7848If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7849likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7850However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7851will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7852other DOS application as a subprocess.
7853
7854Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7855You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7856
7857If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7858subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7859have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7860Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7861separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7862Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7863
7864** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7865
7866This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7867which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7868minibuffer contains.
7869
7870** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7871
7872The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7873It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7874It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7875affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7876
7877The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7878it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7879and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7880when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7881
7882** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7883enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7884
7885** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7886F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7887Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7888
7889If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7890menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7891something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7892the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7893
7894 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7895
7896** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7897to replace the characters it "deletes".
7898
7899** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7900
7901** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7902a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7903select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7904It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7905immediately after the selected one.
7906
7907This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7908made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7909
7910** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7911
7912Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7913directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7914If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7915Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7916recover-session.
7917
7918You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7919auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7920will not work.
7921
7922Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7923normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7924this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7925bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7926now that the bug is fixed.
7927
7928** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7929
7930There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7931when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7932Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7933which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7934
7935If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7936telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7937VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7938the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7939
7940** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7941Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7942is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7943
7944There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7945Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7946enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7947The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7948remain normal.
7949
7950** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7951header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7952
7953Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7954known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7955offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7956Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7957
7958Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7959of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7960a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7961name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7962documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7963`mail-directory-stream'.)
7964
7965** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7966skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7967characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7968with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7969
7970Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7971- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7972wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7973
7974The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7975less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7976headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7977Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7978Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7979fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7980to a limitation in font-lock).
7981
7982External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7983
7984** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7985buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7986buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7987this example:
7988
7989 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7990 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7991
7992** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7993
7994*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7995
7996*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7997
7998*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7999
8000*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8001entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8002will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8003isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8004(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8005The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8006
8007*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8008does the same job.
8009
8010*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8011"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8012
8013*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8014text.
8015
8016** Font Lock mode
8017
8018*** Global Font Lock mode
8019
8020Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8021new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8022font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8023turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8024on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8025
8026For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8027
8028 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8029
8030in your ~/.emacs.
8031
8032*** Local Refontification
8033
8034In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8035However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8036those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8037command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8038
8039In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8040(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8041current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8042above and below point.
8043
8044With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8045
8046** Follow mode
8047
8048Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8049buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8050side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8051they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8052split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8053follow-mode.
8054
8055M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8056
8057To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8058command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8059
8060** hide-show changes.
8061
8062The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8063to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8064normal hooks.
8065
8066** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8067The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8068
8069** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8070recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8071those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8072
8073** MSDOS Changes
8074
8075*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8076Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8077
8078*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8079and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8080
8081*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8082
8083*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8084pressing both mouse buttons.
8085
8086*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8087restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 8088are:
a933dad1
DL
8089
8090**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8091now works.
8092
8093**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8094
8095**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8096implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8097
8098**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8099
8100**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8101
8102**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8103
8104**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8105
8106**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8107\f
8108* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8109
8110** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8111tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8112remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8113this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8114behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8115
8116** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8117
8118The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8119not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8120need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8121be different.
8122
8123It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8124than `system-type'.
8125
8126See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8127
8128** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8129now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8130
8131** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8132that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8133
8134** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8135no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8136reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8137
8138The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8139to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8140like this:
8141
8142 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8143
8144SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8145It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8146becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8147
8148REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8149seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8150means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8151
8152*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8153up if too much time passes.
8154
8155 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8156
8157This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8158If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8159of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8160form in BODY.
8161
8162*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8163a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8164call looks like this:
8165
8166 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8167
8168SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8169runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8170timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8171ARGS.
8172
8173Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8174command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8175command.
8176
8177REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8178time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8179does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8180each time Emacs becomes idle.
8181
8182If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8183idle for SECS seconds.
8184
8185*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8186all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8187programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8188instead.
8189
8190*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8191there is no answer within a certain time.
8192
8193 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8194
8195asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8196within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8197Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8198
8199** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8200arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8201meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8202arguments in between are ignored.
8203
8204This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8205the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8206
8207** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8208/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8209/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8210site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8211version.
8212
8213It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8214version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8215for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8216has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8217and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8218problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8219
8220** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8221.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8222systems with limited file name syntax.
8223
8224Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8225convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8226for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8227completions.el:
8228
8229(defvar save-completions-file-name
8230 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8231 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8232
8233This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8234depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8235convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8236Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8237MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8238
8239** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8240rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8241minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8242
8243** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8244marker from its buffer position.
8245
8246** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8247Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8248The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8249
8250** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8251that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8252condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8253of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8254matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8255regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8256
8257This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8258errors that happen often during editing.
8259
8260** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8261into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8262puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8263
8264** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8265now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8266
8267** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8268a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8269name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8270to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8271and not get-buffer-window.
8272
8273** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8274calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8275being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8276
8277If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8278buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8279property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8280non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8281are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8282property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8283over and over for the same text.
8284
8285** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8286
8287*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8288in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8289
8290;; @(#) HEADER: text
8291;; $HEADER: text $
8292
8293in addition to the normal
8294
8295;; HEADER: text
8296
8297*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8298checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8299lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8300\f
8301* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8302
8303----------------------------------------------------------------------
8304Copyright information:
8305
404fa7d6 8306Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8307
8308 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8309 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8310 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8311 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8312
8313 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8314 of this document, or of portions of it,
8315 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8316 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8317\f
8318Local variables:
8319mode: outline
8320paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8321end: